2016 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

2016 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual
16WK742-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2016 Grand Cherokee SRT
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
SRT
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed “Starting And Operating” for further information.
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisdriving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
four-wheel drive vehicle.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
INTRODUCTION 5
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- ROLLOVER WARNING
tions and recommendations in this manual will help Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about may not.
your satisfaction.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
6 INTRODUCTION
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ RKE Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement RKE Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer RKE Key Fob Programming . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .20
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs . . . . . .25 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .28
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . .36
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Driver
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped . . . .29 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Comfort Systems — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .67
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .106
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of
the RKE Key Fob against the keyless ignition push button
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
and push to operate the ignition.
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob (RKE
Key Fob) and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the RKE Key Fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition position does not change
with the push of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a
low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method
can be used to operate the keyless push button ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
RKE Key Fob
The RKE Key Fob contains an emergency key, which
stores in the rear of the RKE Key Fob.
2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove
box. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the RKE Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING! (Continued)
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the
OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
General Information
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio or unlocked.
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
The system uses a RKE Key Fob, an Ignition Node
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid RKE Key electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced
Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE
Key Fob is used to start the engine.
CAUTION!
NOTE: A RKE Key Fob that has not been programmed is
also considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light
will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid RKE Key Fob to try to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement RKE Key Fobs
NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Customer RKE Key Fob Programming
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
NOTE: Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro- Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
gramming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electron- 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
ics. A blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been
2. This device must accept any interference received,
programmed.
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System sereration.
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
dealer.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks
And Operating⬙ for further information).
and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the folPassive Entry, make sure the vehicles keyless ignilowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
tion system is OFF.
the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
— Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition
Rearming Of The System
system is OFF, and the key is physically removed
from the ignition.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
vehicle:
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
hicle⬙
for further information).
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
Door Handle with a valid RKE Key Fob available in
position.
the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
— Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition button (reYour Vehicle⬙ for further information).
quires at least one valid RKE Key Fob in the vehicle).
• Push the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry, insert a valid key into the ignition
3. If any doors are open, close them.
and turn the key to the ON position.
To Disarm The System
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
the following methods:
on the RKE Key Fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
• Push the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
Security Alarm.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
Tamper Alert
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the RKE
Key Fob to unlock the doors or after opening any door.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will outside mirrors (if equipped).
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
The courtesy lights will fade to off after approximately 30 NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above
seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition disables the system from responding to all RKE Key Fob
buttons for all RKE Key Fobs.
is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, remote start your vehicle (if
equipped), or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up
to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held RKE Key
Fob. The RKE Key Fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
RKE Key Fob
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Flash Lamps With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key
Fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key Fob.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informawhen the doors are unlocked with the RKE Key Fob. The
tion.
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
1st Press Of RKE Key Fob Unlocks
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setThis feature lets you program the system to unlock either ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnderPush and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
Sound Horn With Lock
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors • The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature can be
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
horn will remain on.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
Using The Panic Alarm
vehicle when using the RKE Key Fob to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
by the system.
the PANIC button on the RKE Key Fob for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
and the interior lights will turn on.
authorized dealer.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
battery.
hand.
NOTE:
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
dispose of them according to respect for environment
the seal during removal.
and local laws.
RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to an authorized
dealership, which will deal with their disposal.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
battery to the + sign on the inside of the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
5. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together until they are tightly clamped.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
2. This device must accept any interference received,
battery.
including interference that may cause undesired op4. Fit a new battery in place of the depleted battery.
eration.
When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the
Separating RKE Key Fob Case
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved How To Use Remote Start
by the party responsible for compliance could void the All of the following conditions must be met before the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
engine will remote start:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
This system uses the RKE Key Fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • Hood closed
while still maintaining security. The system has • HAZARD switch off
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE Key • Fuel meets minimum requirement
Fob may reduce this range.
• System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep RKE Key Fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious injury or
death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Driver
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the DID if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The DID message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the
RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds. The parking
lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has
started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will automatically lock the doors.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Remote Start mode.
Start request.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
in the Remote Start mode.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System (if
15-minute cycles) with the RKE Key Fob. However, the equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position push and release the keyless ignition button.
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until
you push the start button. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, Auto-Comfort will work
anytime the temperature conditions are correct. When
the feature is enabled, regardless of Remote Start or
regular keyless start, the driver heated seat features will
automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather,
the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on
when the Remote Start is activated. These features will
stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
Comfort System operation, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
The Comfort System can be activated and deactivated
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
through the Uconnect system. For more information on
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the RKE
Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
Manual Door Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Power Door Lock Switch
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If the door lock switch is pushed down when the door is If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the RKE doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE Key Fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
door is unlocked.
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fobs. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key
Fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs are detected outside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
RKE Key Fob can be locked in the vehicle).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Push the electronic liftgate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
2
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked, then the liftgate will
open with the electronic liftgate release and no RKE Key
Fob is required.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0
m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle
being used to lock the vehicle.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate
will only unlock when you push the electronic liftgate
release. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door NOTE:
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
Key Fob battery is dead.
• Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the
passive entry system.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Key Fob lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
WINDOWS
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio Power Windows
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). passenger door and rear doors which operate the front
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
and rear door windows. The window controls will operate only when the keyless push button ignition is placed
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to ten
minutes after the keyless push button ignition has been
turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this
feature.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” move- Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
ment, operate the switch in either the up or down Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
direction and release the switch.
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
To open the window part way, push to the first detent detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
and release it when you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
“Auto Up” operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Auto-Down Window Switches
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
“Auto Up,” it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during “Auto-Up.” If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the
window manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, push the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
push the Window Lockout button again.
Should the “Auto Up” feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset “Auto Up”:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate
release. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear To Lock The Liftgate
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
electronic liftgate release.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”) or by pushing the LIFTGATE button on the RKE
Key Fob. Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE Key Fob
twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate.
Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by NOTE:
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
can be closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftliftgate is in motion, pushing the LIFTGATE button
gate trim panel.
located on left rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE Key Fob is
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
power liftgate functionality.
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect settings),
WARNING!
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Understanding During power operation, personal injury or cargo
Your Instrument Panel.⬙
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE:
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the Liftgate button
on the RKE Key Fob twice to operate the liftgate.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH • If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
(0 km/h).
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures above 150° F • If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disfrom the liftgate before pushing any of the power
engage to allow manual operation.
liftgate switches.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manureverse to the closed or open position, provided it
ally.
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
(Continued)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Some of the most important safety features in your 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
vehicle are the restraint systems:
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
• Seat Belt Systems
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this
section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
9.
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
position.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can Initial Indication
happen far away from home or on your own street.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the ignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
be belted at all times.
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert Warning Sequence
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
Seat Belt Systems
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! (Continued)
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
2
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an worn snugly and positioned properly.
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
Children 12 years old and under should always be
the entire seat belt is extracted.
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
2
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever- 1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
ity and type of the impact.
3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
(Continued)
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a
collision, the front half of the head restraint will be
extended forward and separated from the rear half of the
head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must
be reset into the original position to best protect the
occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs
that could impair their function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
AHR In Reset Position
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag
the air bag covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Air Bags.
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
WARNING!
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR- The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
2
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
Label Location
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
“AIRBAG.”
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
WARNING!
(Continued)
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Rollover Events
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
structions for cleaning.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF position. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,
remains on while driving.
which could affect the Supplemental Restraint
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warnrelated gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
ing Light will illuminate on the instrument
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec- will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
system immediately.
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
crash investigation.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
were buckled/fastened;
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in restraint.
the rear seats rather than in the front.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
WARNING!
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a it in the vehicle where you will use it.
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to NOTE:
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
additional
information,
refer
to
great that you could not hold the child, no matter • For
www.seatcheck.org
or
call
1-866-732-8243.
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child reuntil the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH anchild and the child restraint is
chorage system to attach the child
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint?
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
No
Do not use the seat belt when you
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
use the LATCH anchorage system
attach a rear-facing or forwardto attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor
center position using the inner
to install a child seat in the center
LATCH lower anchorages?
seating position.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be atNo
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
tached using a common lower
with two or more child restraints.
LATCH anchorage?
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
The child seat may touch the back
touch the back of the front passenof the front passenger seat if the
ger seat?
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be reYes
The head restraint may be removed
moved?
in the center seating position only.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
LATCH Anchorages
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away
from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap
anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchoragesⴖ in the section ⴖInstalling Child Restraintsⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuseat backing.
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatIf the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
anchorages.
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
2
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forthe recommended weight limit of
ward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passentouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be reYes
The head restraint may be removed
moved?
in the center seating position only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR repath of the child restraint?
tractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
against the child seat.
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
more room for the child seat.
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web- belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the Anchorage
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
WARNING!
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
period:
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in 0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
a collision.
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
extended period of time.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
Transporting Pets
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum • Avoid aggressive braking.
performance and maximum durability for your new SRT
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
Vehicle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacobserve local speed limits.
turing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more • Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower
(2414 km).
gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage
observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
SAFETY TIPS
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually Transporting Passengers
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera- AREA.
tor pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
WARNING!
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc- vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
cupant Restraints” for further information.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
Defroster
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
secured to prevent them from moving and interferfeel the air directed against the windshield. See your
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopervehicle.
able.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
Floor Mat Safety Information
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
(Continued)
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING! (Continued)
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .120
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .121
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .160
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . .
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . .
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .152
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . .
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
. . .164
. . .166
. . .166
. . .167
. . .167
. . .168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .169
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .173
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .177
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .181
䡵 HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED . . . .182
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED .184
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .192
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .193
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .199
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .204
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .205
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .208
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .219
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .229
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .241
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .242
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .242
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .248
䡵 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .259
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .250
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .251
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .260
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .255
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .261
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped .276
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .267 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .281
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
3
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
feature On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
features.
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
operator:
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
• The vehicle brand.
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
9-1-1 Call
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
additional help is needed.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors • 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not • Weather.
limited to, the following factors:
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
three detent positions:
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push
the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,
a potential extra button push is required to get the
mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
area which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by
the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror the visors.
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
automatically.
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
seat setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
contamination so that the BSM system can function
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the deproperly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
tection zones.
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
NOTE:
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sensor Location
Warning Light Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrutime, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
ment Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
muted.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating SEATS
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and vehicle.
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Passenger’s Power Seat
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
3
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle
is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
(Continued)
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
3
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
Front Heated Seats
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after apThe front heated seats control buttons are located within
proximately 45 minutes.
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for
HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
Push the switch a second time to select LOlevel heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of indicator lights changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
a second time to
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a third time to
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear- Seats
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compoof the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head
restraints are not removable.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Rear Head Restraint
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and NOTE:
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
fold down easily.
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
Rear Seat Folded
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE Key
Fobs, one RKE Key Fob can be linked to memory position
1 and the other Key Fob can be linked to memory
position 2.
3
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Seat Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(Do not start the engine).
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information
Display (DID) will display which memory position
has been set.
must select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
To program your RKE Key Fobs, perform the following:
Your RKE Key Fobs can be programmed to recall one of
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
switch.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fobs you
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in 1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a 2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
memory profile.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release Driver One Memory Position Recall
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 1 on
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
the memory switch.
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
in the instrument cluster.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE key fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE
5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key
key fob linked to memory position 1.
Fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE key fobs can be unlinked to your Driver Two Memory Position Recall
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 2 on
button on the RKE key fob.
the memory switch.
Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
RKE key fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
key fob linked to memory position 2.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Driver A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
Information Display (DID).
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cancelled, the driver’s seat and steering column (if • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
before another recall can be selected.
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
or Easy Entry.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Entry and Easy Exit position.
vehicle.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Feaposition, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than further information.
or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or To open the hood, two latches must be released.
RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
3
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE:
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper NOTE:
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruapproximately four minutes after the wipers completely
ment Panel” for further information.
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
section for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the dayremain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
to the lower nighttime intensity.
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam SensitivThe Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
Headlight Delay
dealer.
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
The Daytime Running Lights (bright intensity) come on approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the
parking brake is engaged.
headlight switch on then off, or by turning the ignition
The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime ON.
driving.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Light Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pushed on the RKE Key Fob, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
Interior Lights
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front extended periods of time without discharging the vehidoors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating cle’s battery.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the DID, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
Dimmer Control
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Battery Saver
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overis provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
head console.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
3
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
second time. The lights will also turn on when the Courtesy Lights
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
pushed.
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor and center console area.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Flash-To-Pass
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside High/Low Beam Switch
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
defective.
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
3
Multifunction Lever
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
Windshield Washer Operation
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in for a single wiping cycle.
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
Mist Control
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
shield.
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set- with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
further information.
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED
The multifunction lever operates the headlight washers
when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
headlights are turned on. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
To use the headlight washers, push the multifunction
lever inward (toward the steering column) and release it.
The headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure
spray of washer fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the windshield washers will spray the windshield
and the windshield wipers will cycle.
3
NOTE: After turning the ignition switch and headlights
ON, the headlight washers will operate on the first spray
of the windshield washer and then every eleventh spray
after that.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping desired.
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph)
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
continue to decrease until the button is released, then The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
the new set speed will be established.
vehicle set speed.
Metric Speed (km/h)
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the moderate hills is normal.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
continue to decrease until the button is released, then Control.
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
the vehicle ahead.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
appropriate distance between vehicles.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
Control Mode” in this section.
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
NOTE:
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, the mode selected.
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the 4 — SET-/Decel
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications • When you apply the brakes.
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
• When the parking brake is set.
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REActivating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the brakes are overheated.
(32 km/h).
• When the driver door is open.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
To Activate/Deactivate
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be • The brake pedal is applied.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • The ignition is turned OFF.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
To Resume
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
memory if:
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
To Turn Off
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
is pushed.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rebutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
flected in the DID.
in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The decrease in set speed is respeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
NOTE:
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • When you override and push the SET + button or SET
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle distance setting displays in the DID.
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
3
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set- • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
ACC Activation).
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how(shorter).
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the necessary.
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle IndicaACC system applies the brakes.
tor” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
speed.
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
speed.
capacity.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
Brake Alert
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for need for any driver action.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
the brakes autonomously.
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
this moment.
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a information it displays depends on ACC system status.
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display the following displays in the DID:
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver interAdaptive Cruise Control Off
vention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering Display Warnings And Maintenance
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
ACC SET
Warning
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
instrument cluster.
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
• System Cancel
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
• Driver Override
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
• System Off
system will deactivate.
• ACC Proximity Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
• ACC Unavailable Warning
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
five seconds of no ACC display activity
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
section.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
vehicle behind the lower grille.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- simply reactivating it.
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perforonce on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
mance.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
your authorized dealer.
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterdriving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
market grille or modifying the grille is not recomsystem will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
ACC/FCW operation.
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
NOTE:
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the condition that created limited functionality is Precautions While Driving With ACC
no longer present, the system will return to full function- In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
ality.
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectNOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more intervene.
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or Towing A Trailer
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Turn Or Bend Example
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
3
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTurn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changSpeed Control ON. When the vehicle has
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conreached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
trol mode.
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON- U.S. Speed (mph)
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
speed control is SET.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To Vary The Speed Setting
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
To Increase Speed
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conin the DID display.
trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
Metric Speed (km/h)
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reThe speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
flected in the DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Cancel
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the • The CANCEL button is pushed.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysflected in the DID display.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position. MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
20 mph (32 km/h).
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
To Turn Off
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
memory if:
mitigate the potential collision.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle comlooking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. two seconds and then release the brakes.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
FCW Message
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision message will be deactivated.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the display in the controls settings.
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
button once to turn the system OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
collision button again to turn the system ON.
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
in front of you.
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
collision.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the Active Braking is in the “On” setting. This allows the
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front when the distance between the
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
FCW Limited Warning
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
NOTE:
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the fully available. Once the condition that limited the sysdriver after ignition shut down.
tem performance is no longer present, the system will
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as return to its full performance state. If the problem peroverhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the sists, see your authorized dealer.
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, Service FCW Warning
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
screens.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear • The automatic braking function may only be applied if
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collidduring a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped
ing with a detected obstacle.
with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
be automatically applied and released when performing
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
possible collision with an obstacle.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
NOTE:
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
• The driver can override the automatic braking funcsection of the Uconnect System.
tion by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
for the automatic braking function through ignition
automatic brakes are being applied.
cycles.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob- REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
NOTE:
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper• The driver is always responsible for controlling the ating speed, a warning will appear within the Driver
Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is
vehicle.
too fast. The system will become active again if the
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxisubstitute the driver.
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
ParkSense Sensors
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
vehicle’s movements.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita- within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
tions of this system and recommendations.
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
changed to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the DID.
It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat- the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
ing the system status.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Greater
than
79 in (200
cm)
None
79-59 in
(150-100
cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2
Second
Tone
None
None
None
None
Arcs-Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Yes
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disRear chime volume settings can be selected from the
able the system, the instrument cluster will
Customer-Programmable Features section of the
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Unapproximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaInformation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
tion.
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
through ignition cycles.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
affect the performance of ParkSense.
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the DID will
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
DID.
vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An
radio when it is sounding a tone.
open liftgate could provide a false indication that an
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
CAUTION!
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
(Continued)
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
audible indications of the distance between the rear
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmisthe vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collidsion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
ing with a detected obstacle.
and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an • The automatic braking function will not be available if
obstacle.
vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
• The driver can override the automatic braking functhe vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
tion by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the • The automatic braking function can be enabled/
automatic brakes are being applied.
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
for the automatic braking function through ignition disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob- REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxiNOTE:
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID)
indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating
vehicle.
speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
substitute the driver.
6 mph (9 km/h).
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
ParkSense Sensors
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
vehicle’s movements.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita- within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
tions of this system and recommendations.
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
tion of the obstacle.
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the deThe six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
tected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
(DID)” for further information.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in ParkSense Display
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
direction, depending on the location, type and orientabeen detected, the warning display will turn ON indicattion of the obstacle.
ing the system status.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast,
to continuous.
3
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
Single 1/2 Second Tone
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone
Slow Tone For Rear Only
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
3
Fast Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the DID display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Greater
than
79 in (200
cm)
None
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
79-59 in
59-47 in
47-39 in
39-25 in
(150-100
(150-120
(120-100
(100-65 cm)
cm)
cm)
cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2
Second
Tone
None
None
None
None
Arcs-Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Yes
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Arcs-Center
Arcs-Right
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than 47
in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
None
4th Solid
None
No
None
3rd Flashing
None
No
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings”
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
information.
(chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
pedal is applied.
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
through ignition cycles.
the LED will be ON.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙
at either the front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly.
These arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an
object is detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” for further information.
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the DID, see an authorized
dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ ParkSense System Usage Precautions
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the Driver Information Display (DID) NOTE:
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear • Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instruthe vehicle is in REVERSE.
ment cluster.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
radio when it is sounding a tone.
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
position.
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has prothe gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be grammable modes of operation that may be selected
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Setscreen along with a caution note to “check entire sur- tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec- further information.
onds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
plate.
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
hitch/receiver. ⬙Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.⬙ The following table
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
3
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995:
indicator flashes.
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT
the button that is normally used to open and close the
door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
(Rolling Code)
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
activates, programming is complete.
release the button.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Provate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
gramming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
complete the training.
remaining steps.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
channels.
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
program while you push and hold the hand-held (Non-Rolling Code)
transmitter button.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- follow these steps:
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
release the button.
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
and observe the indicator light.
remaining steps.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiseveral seconds of transmission:
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigfully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
door may open and close while you are programming.
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programrelease the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
follow all remaining steps.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
NOTE:
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
programming, plug it back in at this time.
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, any time.
follow these steps:
Security
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Opening Power Shade — Express
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
pushed again.
one-half second and the shade will open automatically
from any position. The shade will open and stop autoClosing Sunroof — Express
matically at the half-open position. Push the shade switch
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
rearward again and release it within one-half second and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
the shade will open automatically to the full-open posiposition. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatition. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
the shade.
stop the sunroof.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Closing Power Shade — Express
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade opening to the Vent position.
completely.
Pinch Protect Feature
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Ignition Off Operation
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
NOTE:
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in AccesWind Buffeting
sory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
the vehicles ignition is placed to the Off position.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain • This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understandopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occuring Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Sunroof Maintenance
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the glass panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
Center Console Outlet
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched from
area.
switched “ignition” only to constant “battery” powered
all the time. See your local authorized dealer for details.
3
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most new computers and
power tools.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Power Inverter
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron- protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the CUPHOLDERS
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices located in the center console.
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.
storage area.
Console Features
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player — If
Equipped
Lower Storage Compartment
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
located in the center console.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING! (Continued)
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
3
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
Push And Release
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the passenger side cargo area will not be availtwice for low, and a third time to return to off.
able.
Three-Push Switch
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins located in the
rear cargo area. There are two storage bins located on
either side of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
3
Lower Storage Bins
Tether Strap
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
WARNING! (Continued)
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
3
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
(Continued)
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mulRotating the center portion upward once more
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
will activate the washer pump which will conThe rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, tinue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
located at the middle of the lever.
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch
is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
MOPAR crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
position.
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built • To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
specifically for this roof rack system.
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not • If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossthe upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
bar over the satellite radio antenna.
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .288
▫ Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .290
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ DID Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .320 䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID). . . . . .321 䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ DID Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ SRT Performance Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ SRT Drive Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Race Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Valet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ ECO Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .399
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .399
䡵 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .412
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .414
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .424
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .433
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .455
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1 — Air Outlet
2 — Instrument Cluster
3 — Radio
4 — Glove/Storage Compartment
5 — Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub)
9 — ESC Button
10 — Keyless Push Button Ignition
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Dimmer Control
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Premium DID Instrument Cluster
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
to the side of the
• The fuel pump symbol points
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
5. Driver Information Display (DID)
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mesAlways refer to the information in this chapter in the
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
event of a failure indication.
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furAll active telltales will display first if applicable. The
ther information.
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is palaced
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and placing the ignition in the position ON/RUN position.
the brake fluid level checked.
The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesbrake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light
sary.
does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4
minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
4
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Speed Limit Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Speed Limit Warning Light
If the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to 120 km/h, the Speed Warning telltale will
display in the DID, and a chime will sound with a pop up warning message.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, a single chime will sound.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for low tire pressure telltale.
those tires.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Service Forward Collision Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact your local authorized dealer for service.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system when the system is engaged. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Track Mode SRT Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Track Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Track Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Tow Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Snow Mode SRT Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Snow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Snow Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is ON, but not set. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Speed Warning Light
Each time the set speed is exceeded, an audible chime will sound for up to 10 seconds or
until the speed is no longer exceeded, the telltale will change from white to yellow (on color
displays), the telltale will flash in sync with the chime, and a pop up message of ⬙Speed
Warning Exceeded⬙ occurs in the DID screen.
NOTE: The vehicle user can select the desired speed at which to be notified.
NOTE: The number “120” is only an example of a speed that can be set.
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driverinteractive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Terrain — If Equipped
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Navigation — If Equipped
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID) Location
The DID Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer Main Gauge
• Vehicle Info
• SRT Performance Pages
• Diagnostic Codes
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
DID Controls
• BACK Arrow Button
Push the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or submenu
item.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• OK Button
• Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
The OK button may be used for the following:
• Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
Selection
• Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy)
Reset (hold)
Clearing (Push)
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warncluster and consist of multiple sections:
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will into several categories:
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for • Five Second Stored Messages
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
white for on demand information.
message takes control of the main display area for five
• Sub-menu Dots— Whenever there are submenus seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
available, the position within the submenus is shown the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
here.
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
DID Displays
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. Ex- seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
amples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages
Engine Oil Life Reset
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
driving style.
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
• Five Second Unstored Messages
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
1. Without depressing the brake pedal, push and release
following procedure.
the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the igniOil Change Reset Procedure
tion to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the 2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ on
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
DID.
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
3. Push and Hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
100%.
within 10 seconds.
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle
ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
with automatic transmission is in Auto-Stick mode. The
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not the cluster information display when the driver configured gear shift point has been reached and the driver is
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
still accelerating. This indication notifies the driver to
change gear corresponding to the configured RPMs in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
head unit. When the shift up indicator is shown on the • Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
display, the PSI is advising the driver to engage a higher
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
gear.
• Traction Control Off
NOTE: The PSI is configured and turned on or off in the
• Washer Fluid Low
head unit “Shift Light: Set Up” page.
The PSI indicator in the cluster information display • Oil Pressure Low
remains illuminated until the driver changes gear, or the
• Oil Change Due
driving conditions return to a situation where changing
gear is not required, corresponding to the configured • Fuel Low
RPMs in the head unit.
• Service Anti-lock Brake System
NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
Your Instrument Panel” for further information on enabling, disabling, and configuring the Performance Shift • Service Power Steering
Indicator.
• Cruise Off
DID Messages
• Cruise Ready
Includes the following, but not limited to:
• ACC Override
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to •
XX”
•
• Service Tire Pressure System
•
• Speed Warning Set to XXX MPH
•
• Speed Warning Exceeded
•
• Parking Brake Engaged
•
• Brake Fluid Low
•
• Service Electronic Braking System
•
• Engine Temperature Hot
•
• Lights On
•
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Ignition or Accessory On
Vehicle Not In Park
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Too Cold
Remote Start Canceled Door Open
Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
Service Air Bag System
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
DID Selectable Menu Items
• Door Open
• Doors Open
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the DID.
• Liftgate Open
Speedometer Main Gauge
4
• Hood Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or green telltales area on the right, and the amber
or red telltales area on the left.
Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button
or the LEFT
arrow button located on the
steering wheel controls to toggle between a
large/small speedometer display.
Push and release the OK button located on the steering
wheel controls to toggle between speed units, MPH
and km/h.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Tire Pressure
• When warnings notifications and other DID pop-ups Coolant Temperature
are present, the large centered speedometer digital
Transmission Temperature
image will switch to the small digital image located to
the right side on the tachometer.
Oil Temperature
• When all pop-ups clear, the DID display will return to Oil Pressure
the large centered speedometer digital image.
Oil Life
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Battery Voltage
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
ar- Intake Air Temperature
row button until the Vehicle Info icon/title is Engine Torque
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
or RIGHT
arrow button to scroll Engine Power
LEFT
through the information submenus and push and
release the OK button to select or reset the resettable
submenus:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Performance Features
WARNING! (Continued)
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arothers. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
row button until the SRT icon/title is high- prevent accidents.
lighted in the DID. Push and release the
or RIGHT
arrow button to scroll The Performance Features include the following:
LEFT
through the performance feature submenus.
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
WARNING!
– Last
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor– Current
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off– Reaction Time — If Selected
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
(Continued)
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Time — If Selected
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Time — If Selected
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Time — If Selected
• 0-60 feet (0-18 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Time — If Selected
• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
• Current G-Forces
• Peak G-Forces
• Lap Timer
• Lap History
– Will list the last 4 laps with the best lap highlighted
in green.
• Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Time
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 MPH (0 to 100 km/h)
within 10 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 100
MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
MPH (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds.
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to 100
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 MPH
MPH (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
button for two seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 MPH 1/8 Mile (200 Meters) Time
(0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
two seconds.
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) Time
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH
the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h)
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condiwithin 20 seconds.
tions are met for the event to begin.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.
MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run,
push and hold the OK button for five seconds.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1/4 Mile (400 Meters) Time
NOTE: This number is most associated with chassis
efficiency, or “hook”.
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the Braking Distance
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (400 meters).
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi- pushed.
tions are met for the event to begin.
• This feature will only function when applying the
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4
brakes at speeds above 30 MPH (48 km/h).
mile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile (400 meters) run,
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are
push and hold the OK button for two seconds.
met for the event to begin.
60 Foot (18 Meters) Time
• The distance and speed measurements display while
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
the event is taking place.
vehicle to travel 60 ft (18 meters) as measured from the
Initial acceleration, the charge a vehicle makes off the • The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a comstarting line and through those sixty-foot timers.
plete stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the Lap Timer
current and last run values.
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer
always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time
Current G-Force
data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of • Pushing OK will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.
the forces.
• When OK is pushed, the times are updated accordPeak G-Force
ingly.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force • As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
“current” timer will stop and the time will be reset to
0:00.00.
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the • If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “curG-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
rent” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed
in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON
• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force
position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
values.
• Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current
time populates, the Last time and also populates the
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current Top Speed
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button. When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since
• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away last reset:
from this page.
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every
Lap History
time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here
unless/until the driver resets the screen.
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and
will color highlight the time that is the best time from the • Latching over ignition cycles.
Timer Page.
• Units will change with the global change in units.
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates
the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
Push and release the UP
or
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from
arrow button until the
DOWN
the Timer Page.
Terrain display icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are
or LEFT
arrow
the RIGHT
on.
button to display the Selec-Track or
• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
Drivetrain.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Average MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
• Range
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Driver Assist display Trip
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. For
further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu
icon/title is highlighted. Push and hold the
OK button to reset feature. Push the LEFT
or RIGHT
arrow button to select the different
Fuel Economy sections. The Fuel Economy screen may
be on the same screen as the Current Fuel Economy.
• Current MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
To Empty
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the DID, then press and release the
or RIGHT
arrow button to seLEFT
lect Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the
RIGHT
arrow button will allow you to see what
the stored messages are.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Audio Menu icon/title Screen Setup
is highlighted in the DID.
Navigation — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Navigation Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID. This feature allows you to
see the turn-by-turn display when destination is set in Head Unit.
Stored Messages
or DOWN
arrow button
Push and release the UP
until the Messages Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as
needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Trip B
Current Gear
• Speed Limit
• On
Upper Right
• Off (default setting)
• None
Upper Left
• Compass
• None
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Compass (default setting)
• Time
• Outside Temp
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Time
• Fuel Economy Average
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Current
• Fuel Economy Average
• Trip A
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip B
• Trip A
• Speed Limit
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Favorite Menus
• Speed Warning
• Tachometer
Gear Display
• Vehicle Info
• Full (default setting)
• Terrain
• Single
• Performance
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Driver Assist
• Restore
• Fuel Economy
• Cancel
• Trip
Screen Setup — If Equipped
• Audio
Diagnostics — If Equipped
• Navigation
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Diagnostic Codes
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Diagnostics display
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push
and release and release the OK button to
display the diagnostic trouble codes and descriptions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
When the end of the list is reached, ⬙No or End of Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
Diagnostic Code⬙ will appear in the DID.
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Speed Warning Menu
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter speed
or DOWN
arrow button to
warning. Use the UP
select a desired speed, then push and release the OK
button to set the speed. The Speed Warning telltale
will display in the DID, and a chime will sound with
a pop up warning message when the set speed is
exceeded.
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the
driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver by load reduction:
Information Display (DID).
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a
rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
NOTE:
• HVAC System
• The charging system is independent from load reduc- • 115V AC Power Inverter System
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
• Audio and Telematics System
charging system continuously.
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
the following conditions:
indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to
“Battery Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding • The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. • The battery was used for an extended period with the
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towconsoles and similar devices.
ing, frequent stopping).
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec- message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar Saver Mode”)
devices.
During a trip:
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
parking periods).
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
(weeks, months).
+12V, 115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
– Check the audio settings (volume)
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
• The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
not help to identify the cause.
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
CYBERSECURITY
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be installed.
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons
On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety
Back buttons located below the Uconnect system.
& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear
turn the touchscreen on.
Personal Data, and System Information.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Display
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
• Display Mode
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- When in this display you may select one of the auto
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired display settings. To change Mode status, select from
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing next to the setting, showing that setting has been sethat setting has been selected. Once the setting is com- lected.
plete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touch- NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
screen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X” Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the even though the headlights are on.
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
down through the available settings.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any • Set Theme
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
This feature will allow you to choose a background
touchscreen.
theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with background color, highlight color, and button color of the
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and display screen.
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or • Set Language
⬙parade⬙ positions.
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display noWhen in this display, you may select the brightness with menclature, including the trip functions and the navigathe headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and tion system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lanpoint on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the guage button on the touchscreen.
touchscreen.
• Touchscreen Beep
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed.
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen Units
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
that setting has been selected.
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
• Controls Screen Time-Out
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
measure are listed below:
ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the
“Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen • Speed
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
that setting has been selected.
• Distance
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster — If
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
Equipped
To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By- • Fuel Consumption
Turn Displayed In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing “km/L.”
that setting has been selected.
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• Temperature
• Show Command List
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Voice
Clock
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Time Hours
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the “12
hrs” or “24 hrs” setting, showing that setting has been
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
selected.
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
down.
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
• Set Time Minutes
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” Safety & Driving Assistance
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
down.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail• Time Format
able:
This feature will allow you to select the time format • Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. This feature can is enabled by a setting in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
radio. The feature can be can be set to Far, Medium or
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near”, “Medium”
or “Far” button.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- indicating that the setting had been selected. For further
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of
Vehicle”.
Your Vehicle.”
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable” The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at
button on the touchscreen.
which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone
start point. To make your selection, touch the “Lane
Departure Warning” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• ParkSense
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
Equipped
ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound” or
“Sound and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for syssteering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
tem function and operating information.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
CAUTION!
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
your selection, touch the “Lane Departure Warning” • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
CAUTION! (Continued)
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect System — if equipped.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Rear Chime
• Front ParkSense Chime Volume
Volume” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
selected from the Driver Information Display (DID) or been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known conUconnect System — if equipped. The chime volume figuration state through ignition cycles.
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory • Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Front Chime Volume” button When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only enabled when ParkSense is also on). To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Parking Assist — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
system function and operating information.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior side view
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To change the mode status,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” button on the touch- Lights
screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press
the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key
Fob. This feature may be selected with or without the
sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your
selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
Doors & Locks
selected. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto Door Locks
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock autowithout the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
• Sound Horn With Lock
selected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears • Sound Horn With Remote Start
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
• Flash Lights With Lock
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
showing that setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button. You must
press the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock
the passenger’s doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the
first press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE Key Fob).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the RKE Key Fob lock or
unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob selected. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, mirrors, steering column position and radio station pretouching the handle more than once will only result in sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the
to ON) when the RKE Key Fob is used to unlock the door. driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touchFeatures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
screen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
• Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showThis feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is ing that setting has been selected.
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
Engine Off Options
“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
setting has been selected.
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
• Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touchSeat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark screen to select your desired time interval.
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
Audio
selected.
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
• Engine Off Power Delay
following settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the power window • Balance/Fade
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the • Equalizer
Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the “+” or
“-” button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
minutes,” or “10 minutes.”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
• Headlight Off Delay
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to touchscreen.
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • Loudness — If Equipped
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
directly on the desired setting.
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
• Speed Adjusted Volume
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Phone/Bluetooth
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• Paired Phones
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. This feature shows which phones are paired to the
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Offset to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchtouchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
screen, the following settings will be available:
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
• Tune Start
touchscreen.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.
This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song
with only a few seconds left to play. To make your
selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of the screen or visit the provider online.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
• Channel Skip
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription Clear Personal Data
and is available for U.S. residents only.
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
• Restore Settings
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal Data Cleared.”
“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your
settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears
stating ⬙Settings Reset To Default.⬙
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
System Information
SRT Performance Pages
After pressing the “System Information” button on the Performance Pages is an application that provides a
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
display for performance indicators, as received from the
Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity
• System Information
with the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real-time.
When System Information is selected, a System InformaTo access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Performance
version.
Pages” button on the touchscreen, or press “SRT Performance Pages” in the top left of the touchscreen while in
Drive Modes. Press the desired button on the touchscreen
to access that specific Performance Page.
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• G-Force
• Engine
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Home
When Home is selected, the following options will be
available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the
user.
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll
through vehicle images.
• A short-cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature.
Performance Pages — Home
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
Timers
• Recent
Pressing the “Recent” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
Performance Pages — Timers
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• Save
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save runs to the jump drive.
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run • With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save
runs to the SD Card.
feature is listed below:
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Performance Pages — Save
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
complete stop.
(200 meters).
• Brake Speed
• ¼ mile (400 meter)
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
brake pedal is depressed.
(400 meters).
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis• 60 ft (18 Meters) time
play ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go 60 ft.
MPH (48 km/h).
• Brake Distance
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start
– from speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Gauges 1
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Gauges 2
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Transmission Temperature
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
G-Force
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Acceleration and Braking
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Acceleration and Braking, Left and
Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
SRT Performance Pages — G-Force
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
they are cleared by the driver.
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle Speed
Engine
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
SRT Performance Pages — Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed in mph or (km/h).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
SRT Drive Modes
Shows instantaneous engine power.
• Instantaneous Torque
Shows instantaneous engine torque in Foot Pounds (lb/
ft).
4
• Oil Pressure
Shows actual oil pressure in Pounds per Square Inch
(PSI) or Kilopascals (kPa).
• Gear
Shows the current (or pending) operating transmission
gear of the vehicle.
Drive Modes
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature
which allows for coordinating the operation of various
vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
behavior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled shown will indicate the actual status of each system,
through with the Selec-Track switch and may be accessed along with a vehicle graphic that displays the active drive
mode status. The color red indicates “Track,” orange
by performing any of the following:
“Sport,” yellow “Street” and blue for “Snow.” These
• Pushing the SRT button on the Selec-Track switch.
features will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle. If the
• Pushing the Custom button on the Selec-Track switch. system status shown does not match the current drive
mode set up, a message will be displayed indicating
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from the “Apps” menu.
which values are not matching the current mode.
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from within the Performance
NOTE: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full-Off can be
Pages menu.
activated by pushing and holding the ESC Off button on
The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current the instrument panel switch bank for five seconds.
drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s performance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes are
Track, Sport, Auto, Snow, Tow or Custom. Information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Listed below are the available Drive Modes:
Track Mode
Drive Modes (Track)
Selecting “Track” with the Selec-Track switch will activate the configuration for typical track driving. The
Transmission, Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their “Track”
settings highlighted in red. The Paddle Shifters are
enabled.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting “Sport” with the Selec-Track switch will activate the configuration for typical enthusiast driving. The
Transmission, Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their “Sport”
settings highlighted in orange. The Paddle Shifters are
enabled.
Sport Mode
Drive Modes (Sport)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Selecting “Tow” with the Selec-Track switch will activate
the configuration for towing a trailer. Once in this mode,
trailer sway control is enabled in the ESC system. The
Transmission is set to “Tow” setting highlighted in
purple. Stability Control is set to “Full” highlighted in
blue. All-Wheel Drive is set to “50/50” highlighted in
blue. Steering is set to “Street” highlighted in yellow.
Suspension is set to “Sport” highlighted in orange.
Tow Mode
Drive Modes (Tow)
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting “Snow” with the Selec-Track switch will activate snow mode for use on loose traction surfaces. When
in Snow mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use second gear (rather than
first gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
The Transmission is set to “Snow” setting highlighted in
blue. Stability Control is set to “Full” highlighted in blue.
All-Wheel Drive is set to “50/50” highlighted in blue.
Steering is set to “Street” highlighted in yellow. Suspension is set to “Street” highlighted in yellow.
Snow Mode
Paddle shifters can be enabled or disabled by pressing
the “Snow Set-up” button on the touchscreen.
Drive Mode Snow
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Auto Mode
4
Snow Mode Set-Up
Drive Mode Auto (Default)
Auto mode is enabled upon ignition on, or by selecting
“Auto” with the Selec-Track switch. The Transmission,
Stability Control and All-Wheel Drive modes are set to
their “Street” settings highlighted in yellow. Steering and
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Suspension can be configured in either the “Street,” Custom Mode
“Sport,” or “Track” and the Paddle Shifters may be
enabled or disabled while in auto set-up mode.
Custom Mode
Auto Mode (Default)
Custom Mode may be selected by pushing the “Custom”
button on Selec-Track switch. Custom Mode allows you
to create a custom configuration that is saved for quick
selection of your favorite settings. While in Custom
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Mode, the All-Wheel Drive, Stability Control, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, and Paddle Shifter settings
are shown in their current configuration.
While in the Custom Mode screen, press the “Custom
Set-Up” button on the touchscreen to access the selectable options. Select which mode suits your driving needs
for a custom driving experience.
4
Custom Mode Set-Up
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Custom Mode Set-Up Info
All-Wheel Drive
Within the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, press the “info”
button on the touchscreen then use the left/right arrows
to scroll through all the available Drive Mode systems
giving you a description of their operation and current
configuration.
All-Wheel Drive
• Track
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide
the greatest distribution of torque to the rear wheels
(70%.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
• Sport
Transmission
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater distribution of torque to the rear wheels (65%.)
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide
moderate distribution of torque to the rear wheels (60%.).
4
• 50/50
Press the “50/50” button on the touchscreen to provide
even distribution of torque between the front and rear
wheels.
Eight Speed Transmission
• Track
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide
the fastest shift speeds with the strongest comfort tradeoff.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sport
Paddle Shifters
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide
faster shift speeds with some comfort trade-off.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily
driving.
Paddle Shifters
• ON
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel paddle shifters.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
• OFF
• Track
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable Pressing the “Track” button on the touchscreen will
steering wheel paddle shifters.
provide minimal stability control.
Stability Control
• Sport
Pressing the “Sport” button on the touchscreen will
provide reduced stability control.
• Street
Pressing the “Street” button on the touchscreen provides
full (default) stability control.
Stability Control Settings
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Track
Suspension
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide
the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest
amount of comfort trade-off.
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide a
firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort tradeoff.
• Street
Suspension
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for
typical daily driving.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
• Track
Steering
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort and feel to the greatest level.
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort and feel to a greater level.
• Street
Press the “Street⬙ button on the touchscreen to balance
the steering feel and comfort.
Steering
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Launch Control screen. Within Race Options, you can
activate, deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the
Launch Control and Shift Light features.
Race Options
Launch Control
WARNING!
Race Options
Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen
while in the Drive Modes screen, to display the vehicle’s
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Launch Control can be accessed by pushing the Launch
button on the Selec-Track switch or pushing the SRT
button on the Selec-Track switch then selecting the “Race
Options” button on the touchscreen. Press the “Activate
Launch Control” button on the touchscreen to activate
the feature. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” to set the
holding RPM. Launch Mode can be turned on or off by
either pushing the Launch Control button on the SelecTrack Swith, or by pressing the “Cancel Launch Mode”
button on the touchscreen.
Activate Launch Control
NOTE: Launch RPM Set-Up cannot be accessed unless
Launch Mode is deactivated.
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Shift Light
Launch RPM Set-Up
To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press
the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM.
Shift Light In Paddle Shift Mode
The launch RPM limit is between 1500 and 3500 RPM.
Your vehicle is equipped with a shift light feature that
For further information refer to “Drive Modes” in “Start- illuminates the back lighting of the tachometer (in red)
ing and Operating”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
within the Driver Information Display (DID). This feature is a visual cue to manually up-shift using the paddle
shifters.
To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the “Shift Light”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Shift Light
On” button on the touchscreen. Activation is shown on
the DID. Pressing the “Shift Light RPM Set-Up” button
on the touchscreen will take you to the Shift Light RPM
Set-Up screen.
NOTE: You must be in Paddle Shift Mode in order to
activate the shift light. Refer to “Paddle Shift Mode” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
Shift Light RPM Set-Up
The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the shift
light to illuminate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-8. Pressing
and releasing the up/down arrow buttons above and
below each listed gear, the RPM values will change in
increments of 250 RPM. Pressing and holding the arrows
will change the RPM values in increments of 500 RPM,
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ranging from 2000–6000 RPM. The Shift Light setup Valet Mode
screen may only be accessed if the feature is enabled,
press the “Reset to factory default” button on the touchscreen to change back to factory settings, or press the
“Shift Light Off” button on the touchscreen to turn the
system off completely.
Valet Mode Activation
To enter Valet Mode press the “Valet” button on the
touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you
would like to enter Valet Mode, after selecting “Yes” you
will be asked to enter a 4 digit PIN code. The PIN code is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
not set, so you are free to select any 4 digit numeric
combination that will be easy to remember.
While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations
are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:
• All-Wheel Drive is set to 50/50.
4
• Transmission locks out access to first gear and upshifts earlier than normal.
• Stability Control, Steering, and Suspension are set to
their STREET settings.
• Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled.
Valet Mode Deactivation
• The Drive Mode interface is not available. Pushing the To exit Valet Mode you must enter the same 4 digit PIN
SRT button on Selec-Track switch will display the that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can
unlock keypad.
be accessed by either pushing the SRT button on SelecTrack switch, or pressing the “Valet” button on the
• The ESC Off button is disabled.
touchscreen.
• The Launch Control button is disabled.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt
you for your 4 digit PIN code, enter your PIN code and
press the “OK” button on the touchscreen. Your vehicle
will return to the default state after a key cycle.
NOTE: If your 4 digit PIN is lost or forgotten, the vehicle
will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for approximately one minute. Reconnect the battery and cycle
the ignition to the RUN position, the vehicle will be in
Default Mode.
Valet Mode Deactivation PIN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or
vibration may be noticed while ECO is active. This is
normal and a result of the increased amount of operating
conditions where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four
cylinder shutoff mode.
ECO Mode
The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in ECO mode.
• Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate ECO.
• ECO will be disabled when another Drive Mode is
selected or ECO button is pushed.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
Eco Mode
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Push the ECO button on the center stack of the instru- iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
ment panel to enter ECO mode. ECO mode modifies the
vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
improved fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration plugged into the USB port.
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod Getting Started
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over
the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
RSE System Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray Disc Player, the icon
will be present on the Player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pushing the Power button on the remote control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Bluray Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
4
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
(passenger side).
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
4
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray Disc player is located in the center console.
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player with the
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The
radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen,
the language screen, or starts playing the first track.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear Using The Touchscreen Radio
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side
rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, and then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, and then the “full
screen” button.
Rear Media Control Screen
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. The vehicle must be 1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1. This
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
is not highlighted, select button to access controls for 6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
2. RSE Power
7. Cabin Audio Mode
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
control screen.
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle.
Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
8. RSE Mode
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Select this button to change source for the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This
press the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button • Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin
playing the Blu-ray Disc on the touchscreen radio.
is not highlighted, select button to access controls for
Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen), and
then press the source key, and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
ENTER/OK.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment
Screen
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect radio touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
4
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote
Rear Media Control Screen
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, and the control functions for DVD play such as scene selection,
select source button on the touchscreen. Press the Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA col- corner will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
umn. To exit, press the X at the top right of the screen.
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray Discs.
• When selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video
source will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear
1.
• When selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video
source will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear
2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
Controls And Indicators
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone 7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
current audio track or video chapter.
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
play.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray Disc
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
features.
button is illuminated momentarily.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
shuffle options, the Blu-ray Disc popup menu, the
DVD title menu, or to access disc menus.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan- 12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
nel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
current audio track or video chapter.
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
— Mutes headphone audio.
14.
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to 2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
source selection screen.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a Headphones Operation
menu.
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
18. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op- the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
eration. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
operation. To replace the batteries:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the 1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
downward.
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi- Warranty
NOTE:
gate to the available modes and push the OK button to Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
select the new mode.
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire- FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer- INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
able.
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
as long as you own the Product.
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have any questions or comments regarding your Display Settings
Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
phone at 1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD
Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.),
pushing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appear- • Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
ance of the video on the screen. The factory default
• Close the video screen.
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circum- • To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically sestances.
lect the next available audio mode without using the
To change the settings, push the remote control’s navigaMode/Source Select menu.
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the • When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
display menu or media.
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
button.
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player’s illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the are installed in the headphones.
screen closed:
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Formats
DVD Audio Support
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of the playing the When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc
following types of 4.7 in (12 cm) diameter discs :
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD, material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
DVD-VR
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6) the disc or to another mode.
profile 3.0
Recorded Discs
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
by geographic region. These region codes must match in CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
disc does not match the region code for the player, the DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or redisc will not play.
corded) are not supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
closed are playable.
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
each track number is unique.
DVD player.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
supported.
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 CD-RW).
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension • If you are creating your own files, the recommended
to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
always end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
WMA files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙
supported. For both formats, the recommended
or ⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as • To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next
file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downor previous file.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and Disc Errors
begin playing the next available file.
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, ⬙Disc Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc
player will automatically skip the file and begin play- format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
ing the next available file.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherskipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will disassembly is prohibited.
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
the start of the first track.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during ex- Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
tremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s inte- Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
rior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
occurs, the player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut reserved.
off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
of the Blu-ray Disc player.
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
Product Agreement
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
This product incorporates copyright protection technol- access the switches.
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
4
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
will tune to the next preset station that you have promode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
grammed in the radio preset button.
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
CD Player
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
or anti-static sprays.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coatprecautions:
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
surface.
good disc before considering disc player service.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
body.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is found in radio frequency safety standards and recomnot harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the community.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitRADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
USA/CANADA
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Regulatory And Safety Information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
2. This device must accept any interference received,
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
including interference that may cause undesired opmore of the following measures:
eration.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
NOTE:
receiver.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
for help.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter- CLIMATE CONTROLS
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.), the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
The Faceplate And The Buttons On The Touchscreen) Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
1. MAX A/C Button
this function will cause the system to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing Operation” for more information.
4
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
turns off after 10 minutes.
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button the passenger temperature setting with the driver temon the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
10. Blower Control
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
9. SYNC
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated control knob counterclockwise.
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
12. Climate Control OFF Button
the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
time.
Provides the driver with independent temperature conClimate Control Functions
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the A/C (Air Conditioning)
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
time.
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
MAX A/C
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforFloor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but mance.
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
of the windows.
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, when MAX A/C is ON.
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
needed.
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
Recirculation
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temRecirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
perature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is dislead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
played, the system will achieve and automatically
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
maintain that comfort level.
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
the system to function automatically.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
NOTE:
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
and then turn off.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
4
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the Uconnect customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System
Settings” in this section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Manual Operation Override
Operating Tips
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- suggested control settings for various weather conditrol.
tions.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winWinter Operation
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side winis not recommended because it may cause window
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
fogging.
but rainy or humid weather.
Vacation Storage
NOTE:
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatiadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Outside Air Intake
A/C Air Filter
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
these steps:
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4A/
8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Uconnect 8.4AN
4
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
TIP: Press the “browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the “phonebook” button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say:
lp;&1qthe Phone button
“Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
I will be
<number>
Are you there
Call me.
minutes late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
4
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
use your voice to send a text message.
steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
4
450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
Assist Button
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access. 2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
4
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
. After
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and 1. To send a message, push the Phone button
the beep, say the following command: “Send mespress Link.
sage to John Smith.”
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
process your message.
your personalized music.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
• Once you download the app to your compatible You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
mobile device, you will also be able to start your compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any- to send a personalized text message. For details about
where.
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
4
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if 3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
screen, push the VR button
search.”
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
Uconnect to find.
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
Yelp
4
456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com- set reminders, and more. For further information go to
the
Mopar
Owner
Connect
website
mand.
moparownerconnect.com.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can • Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characuse your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings,
ters.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 457
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undetouchscreen while typing a custom message.
sired operation.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected NOTE:
so you can still place a second call without being inter• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
rupted by incoming calls.
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not exNOTE:
pressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPdevice.
hones.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num• Auto reply with text message is only available on
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciphones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
fications were met.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
4
458 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours
a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .470
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .471
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
䡵 SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Custom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Active Damping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Launch Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .508
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED .497
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .501
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .501
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .515
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped . . . .518
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .502 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .528 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .545
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .533 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .546
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .548
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .536
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .557
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .562
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (SRT
Models) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is
in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the Driver Information
Display (DID) will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
message and the engine will remain running. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (DID will
display “OFF”).
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
If Engine Fails To Start
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (DID will display
“ACC”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (DID will
display “ON/RUN”),
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
WARNING! (Continued)
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is
in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also
be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehiFuel Economy Mode Switch
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condiWhen
the
Fuel
Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
tions. Press the “ECO” switch in the center stack of the
vehicle
control
systems
will change the following:
instrument panel to activate or disable ECO mode. An
amber light indicates when ECO mode is engaged.
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
• The transmission will launch (from a stop) in second This system relies on four microphones embedded in the
headliner to detect the exhaust drone and prompt an
gear.
onboard frequency generator to create counteracting
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower
sound waves through the audio system’s speakers and
engine speeds and remain on longer.
sub-woofer. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at highway
speeds.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more conser- Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
vative.
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib- besides the gear selector bezel and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, press the
ited based on temperature and other factors.
lock button on the gear selector and move the lever
NOTE: ECO mode is only available in AUTO mode.
rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal
Active Noise Cancellation
must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellashift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
tion System, this system is designed to address the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
change in exhaust noise whenever the vehicle is operat“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this secing in Fuel Economy Mode (ECO) or 4 cylinder mode.
tion). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the
AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position), or
tapping the shift paddles (+/-), will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precauNEUTRAL into another gear range.
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could
result.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
gear selector and push the lever all the way forward
until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified dependThis range should be used for most city and highway
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downvehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- MANUAL (M)
tics under all normal operating conditions.
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as position) enables full manual control of transmission
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Togwhile towing a heavy trailer), select TOW mode (refer to gling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
“Selec-Track” in “Starting And Operating”) or use the in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually
AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this select the transmission gear, and will display the current
section for further information) to select a lower gear. gear in the instrument cluster.
Under these conditions, using TOW mode or a lower
Transmission Limp Home Mode
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
DRIVE (D)
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
following steps:
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enrecur.
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
When To Use TOW Mode
Operation
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, select TOW mode, using the rotary switch on the
center console. Selecting TOW mode will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. Refer to
“Selec-Track” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
To activate AutoStick mode, move the shift lever into the
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position), or
tap one of the shift paddles on the steering wheel.
Tapping the (-) shift paddle to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while
tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the
current gear. The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you
can use the shift lever (in the MANUAL position), or the
shift paddles, to manually shift the transmission. Tapping
the shift lever forward (-) while in the MANUAL (M)
position, or tapping the (-) shift paddle on the steering
wheel, will downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear. Tapping the lever rearward (+) (or tapping the (+)
shift paddle) will command an upshift.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing, NOTE: The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, as desired) using Drive Modes.
trailer towing, and many other situations.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
In AutoStick, the transmission will shift up or down • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
shift lever or the shift paddles), unless an engine lugging
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
of a vehicle speed.
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
speed.
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
fault or overheat condition is detected.
vehicle is accelerated.
To disengage AutoStick, return the shift lever to the
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
(or third gear, in SNOW mode). Tapping (+) (at a stop) the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once
will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in
second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
or out of AutoStick at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Track Switch
Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the vehicle con- Refer to “Drive Modes” in this section for further infortrol systems, along with driver input, to provide the best mation.
performance for all terrains.
Selec-Track consists of the following positions:
Rotate the Selec-Track knob to select the desired mode.
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Performance
based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
with improved handling and acceleration over a two- • Tow – Use this mode for towing and hauling heavy
wheel drive vehicle. This feature will reset to AUTO on
loads. Vehicle suspension will go to sport mode. Trailer
sway control is enabled in the ESC system. This feature
an ignition cycle.
will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces Custom
such as snow. This feature will reset to AUTO upon an This mode allows the driver to create a custom vehicle
ignition cycle.
configuration that is saved for quick selection of favorite
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles.
settings. The system will return to AUTO mode when the
ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this
mode is selected. While in Custom Mode the Stability,
Transmission, Steering, Suspension, all-wheel drive set
up, and Paddle shifter settings may be configured
through the custom mode set-up.
• Track – Track road calibration for use on high traction
surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some NOTE: Please refer to “Drive Modes” in this section or
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. This “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Active Damping System
DRIVE MODES
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
in many driving situations including cornering, acceleration and braking. There are 3 modes:
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode
feature. This feature gives the driver control over the
systems in the vehicle which affect its performance,
enabling the driver to tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation:
• Street Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used during highway NOTE: Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your
speeds where a touring suspension feel is desired.
Instrument Panel” for further descriptions of these
modes.
• Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Provides a firm
suspension for better handling.
• Track Firm (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Provides a full firm suspension for an aggressive track experience.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
• SPORT MODE — This mode is a predefined configuration optimized for typical enthusiast driving. The
Transmission, Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive,
Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their
“Sport” settings highlighted in orange. The Paddle
Shifters are enabled.
• TOW MODE — This mode is a predefined configuration optimized for towing a trailer. Once in this mode,
trailer sway control is enabled in the ESC system. The
Transmission is set to “Tow” setting highlighted in
purple. Stability Control is set to “Full” highlighted in
blue. All-Wheel Drive is set to “50/50” highlighted in
Drive Modes
blue. Steering is set to “Street” highlighted in yellow.
• TRACK MODE — This mode is a predefined configuSuspension is set to “Sport” highlighted in orange.
ration optimized for typical track driving. The Transmission, Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive, Steering, • SNOW MODE — This mode is a predefined configuand Suspension systems are all set to their “Track”
ration optimized for use on loose traction surfaces.
settings highlighted in red. The Paddle Shifters are
When in Snow mode (depending on certain operating
enabled.
conditions), the transmission may use second gear
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
(rather than first gear) during launches, to minimize
wheel slippage. The Transmission is set to “Snow”
setting highlighted in blue. Stability Control is set to
“Full” highlighted in blue. All-Wheel Drive is set to
“50/50” highlighted in blue. Steering is set to “Street”
highlighted in yellow. Suspension is set to “Street”
highlighted in yellow.
• AUTO MODE — This mode activated when selecting
“Auto” with the Selec-Track switch. The Transmission,
Stability Control and All-Wheel Drive modes are set to
their “Street” settings highlighted in yellow. Steering
and Suspension can be configured in either the
“Street,” “Sport,” or “Track” and the Paddle Shifters
may be enabled or disabled while in auto set-up mode.
• CUSTOM MODE — This mode allows the driver to
create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for
quick selection of favorite settings. Custom Mode may
be selected by pushing the “Custom” button on SelecTrack switch. Custom Mode allows you to create a
custom configuration that is saved for quick selection
of your favorite settings. While in Custom Mode, the
All-Wheel Drive, Stability Control, Transmission,
Steering, Suspension, and Paddle Shifter settings are
shown in their current configuration. While in the
Custom Mode screen, press the “Custom Set-Up”
button on the touchscreen to access the selectable
options. Select which mode suits your driving needs
for a custom driving experience.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Sport — provides greater distribution of torque to the
rear wheels (65%.)
• Street — provides moderate distribution of torque to
the rear wheels (60%.).
• 50/50 — provides even distribution of torque between
the front and rear wheels.
Transmission
• Track — provides the fastest shift speeds and has the
highest comfort trade-off.
Custom Mode Set-Up
Listed below is a description of each of these settings:
All-Wheel Drive
• Track — provides the greatest distribution of torque to
the rear wheels (70%.)
• Sport — provides a faster shift speed and has a
moderate comfort trade-off.
• Street — provides a balance of shift speed and comfort
for typical daily driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Paddles
• On — enables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters.
• Off — disables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters.
Stability Control
• Track — modifies traction control to optimize track
performance with the least stability control.
• Sport — provides a firmer suspension stiffness with
moderate comfort trade-off.
• Street — provides a balance of suspension stiffness
and ride comfort for typical daily driving.
Steering
• Track — provides the greatest amount of steering
feedback, requiring the highest amount of steering
effort.
• Sport — turns off traction control and reduces stability
• Sport — provides greater steering feedback, requiring
control.
greater steering effort.
• Street — provides full traction control and full stability
• Street — provides a balance of steering feedback and
control.
steering effort.
Suspension
• DEFAULT MODE — This mode will be activated
• Track — provides the firmest possible suspension
automatically when restarting the vehicle unless Valet
stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off.
mode or ECO mode is active. This mode is for typical
driving conditions where the ABS and Transmission
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
will be operating in their STREET settings, which • Traction, Steering and Suspension are forced to
cannot be changed while in this mode. The Steering
STREET settings.
assist and Suspension (active dampening system) stiff• Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are disabled.
ness may be configured to either the STREET, SPORT
or TRACK settings within this mode. Steering wheel • The SRT Drive Modes are not available. Pushing the
mounted paddle shifters may be enabled or disabled
SRT button will display the unlock keypad.
while in this mode as well.
• The ESC Off button is disabled.
• VALET MODE — To enter this mode the operator
• The Launch Control button is disabled.
must select it from the Drive Modes interface and enter
a four digit PIN code. The PIN code is not predeter- NOTE:
mined, so the operator is free to select any four digit
• To exit VALET Mode the operator must enter the same
numeric combination that will be easy to remember.
four digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The
While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configuraunlock keypad can be accessed by either pushing the
tions are set and locked to prevent unauthorized
SRT button or selecting to disable Valet on the
modification:
Uconnect touchscreen.
• Engine limited to a lowest power output state.
• The vehicle will restart with VALET active if VALET
• Transmission locks out access to first gear and shifts
was active when the vehicle was last shut down.
earlier than normal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
• ECO MODE — This mode modifies the vehicle’s
engine and transmission settings to provide improved
fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or vibration may be noticed while Eco is active, this is normal
and will not damage the vehicle.
NOTE: Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.
Launch Control — If Equipped
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
control resulting in an aborted launch.
Preconditions:
• Launch Control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
• Launch Control is not available within the first 500
miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
and transmission are at operating temperature.
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while • Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only.
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause damage
to vehicle components and is not recommended.
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the Select-Track
switch or pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen
are the two options to access launch control features.
Please refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button on the
touchscreen, follow instructions in the Driver Information Display (DID).
• Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
• Put vehicle in first gear.
• Steering wheel must be pointing straight.
• Vehicle must be on level ground.
• Apply Brake Pressure.
• While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed
will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch
RPM Set-up” screen.
1. Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen or NOTE: Messages will appear in the DID to inform the
push the LAUNCH button on the Select-Track switch. driver if one or more of the above conditions have not
been met.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
4. When the above conditions have been met, the DID NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
will read “Release Brake”.
return to its current ESC mode.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system will return to its current ESC
mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
Launch control will abort before launch completion, Guidelines For Track Use
display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
following conditions:
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
track use is not covered by warranty.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer • If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they
moving in a straight line.
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
situations. It is recommended that your vehicle oper• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
ates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track
to another mode.
event.
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at
the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capacities” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear
brake pads have more than ½ pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads require changing, please burnish
prior to track outing at full pace.
warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to
critical powertrain and cooling system components.
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of
endurance, however, it is recommended that suspension system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft
boots should be checked for wear or damage after
every track event.
• At the conclusion of each track event, it is recom- • Track usage results in increased operating temperamended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to
tures of the engine, transmission, driveline and brake
maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your
system. This may affect noise (NVH) countermeasures
Brembo High Performance brake system.
designed into your vehicle. New components may
need to be installed to return the system to the original
• It is recommended that each track outing should end
NVH performance.
with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal
braking.
• Tire pressure:
• 40psi (276kpa) hot, recommend 32psi (221kpa) front,
• If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille,
30psi (207 kpa) rear cold
it is recommended to remove it for track use during
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applies.
NOTE: It is recommended that you target 40psi (276kpa)
Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion of each track session.
Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do
another cool down lap.
Starting at 32psi (221kpa) Front & 30psi (207 kpa) Rear
Cold and adjusting based on ambient & track conditions
3. Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap
is recommended. Tire pressure can be monitored via the
after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them
Driver Information Display (DID) and can assist with
smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and affect
adjustments.
their life negatively in future track use.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least
30 min. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back out.
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory
installed components or when new brake friction com- 5. There should be a thin, ash layer when inspecting the
pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go
ponents are installed:
more than half the thickness of the pad material
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at
indicates too aggressive of a burnish.
75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max
without ABS intervention.
Track burnishing your brakes:
2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling
the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the
pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce
speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow
step 2-4.
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be
burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should
be burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city
miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on
the rotor surface prior to track use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of
pulsation in further track use.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near
parking blocks may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
• Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm)
deep may cause damage to the front fascia and
ground effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF
– SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
Parking Brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake” Warning Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake” Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
(Continued)
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake” Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required Descent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
with the power system operating.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
NOTE: Due to the performance nature of our brake This function manages the distribution of the braking
systems, some noise is to be expected.
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec- front axle.
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Brake System Warning Light
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both stay on for as long as four seconds.
vehicle stability and control in various driving condiIf the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
tions.
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
• Brake pedal pulsations.
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
WARNING!
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore is released, the BAS is deactivated.
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
WARNING!
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
repaired as soon as possible.
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
Brake Assist System (BAS)
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, incapability during emergency braking maneuvers. The cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens- turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroing the rate and amount of brake application and then planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very the safety of others.
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
roll down the hill as normal.
will remain active.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
(Continued)
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Disabling And Enabling HSA
4. Start the engine.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
current setting, proceed as follows:
turn to the left.
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display
bank below the climate control four times within
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
further information.
turn on and turn off two times.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruadditional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was comfollowing steps:
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
maintain the desired path.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ- path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen- the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approtial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the understeer condition.
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” loThis system enhances directional control and stability of
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC coras the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Traction Control System (TCS)
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
ESC On
will turn off.
ESC Operating Modes
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.
Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to
return to ESC On.
Partial Off
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
NOTE:
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off – If Equipped
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In • In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
ESC OFF Indicator Light
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the NOTE:
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenbeen detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lowhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
that caused the ESC activation.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during accustomer has elected to have the Electronic
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condispeed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMoccur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckoccurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as user’s safety or the safety of others.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
or other vehicles.
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excesNOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
available ESC modes.
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further informa- occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
tion.
panic stop.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power Rain Brake Support (RBS)
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake
WARNING!
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle no driver interaction is required.
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain HDC has three states:
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
steering wheel.
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
with brake or throttle application).
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is Enabling HDC
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
steering the vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
• Parking brake is released.
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. • Driver door is closed.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activating HDC
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
HDC Target Set Speeds
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
NOTE: During HDC, the +/- shifter input is used for
activate
HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling
HDC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving con• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
ditions.
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Driver Override
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
Deactivating HDC
• The parking brake is applied.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of • Driver door opens.
the following conditions occur:
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
for greater than 70 seconds.
application.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
(HDC exits immediately).
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magniFeedback To The Driver
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
Disabling HDC
about the state HDC is in.
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
following conditions occur:
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several engine torque and brakes.
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to SSC has three states:
excess speed.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
with brake or throttle application).
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
and the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
•
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
•
the following conditions are met:
•
• Driver releases throttle.
•
• Driver releases brake.
•
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can • 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
Deactivating SSC
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
NOTE:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
application.
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving condi- • Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
tions.
Disabling SSC
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the followmay be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness. ing conditions occur:
Driver Override:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
brake application at any time.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
for greater than 70 seconds.
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Tire And Loading Information Placard
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
capacity calculated in Step 4.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and vehicle.
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
(392 kg).
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
Metric Example For Load Limit
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
At least once a month:
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mode.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
WARNING!
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
80D18 103M.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
WARNING!
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
of unapproved tires and wheels may change susequipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart expension dimensions and performance characterisample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
this manual for more information relating to the Load
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictIndex and Speed Symbol of a tire.
able handling and stress to steering and suspenIt is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
sion components. You could lose control and have
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
approved for your vehicle.
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, RUD-GRIP 4X4 or Equivalent
is recommended on P295/45R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
5
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with run flat tires — When
the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi (96 kPa) or
lower, always check tire pressure and replace the tire at
the first opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below 14
psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat mode of operation.
In this condition, it is recommended a vehicle maximum
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of 50
miles (80 km). The manufacturer does not recommend
using the run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
at full capacity or towing a trailer.
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off.
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
value.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the
CAUTION!
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
warnings have been established for the tire size
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
eration or sensor damage may result when using
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperatype, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
(Continued)
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
Premium System
failure or condition.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
while adjusting your tire pressure.
NOTE:
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure following components:
readings to the Receiver Module.
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Driver Information Display
(DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain DID will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message, an ⬙Inflate to
XXX⬙ message and a graphic display of the pressure
the proper pressure.
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
value(s) with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color. Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under- active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
pressure displayed in the ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message.
in PSI, BAR or kPa.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will return to its original
color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
TPM sensors.
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
a chime. The DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSthat affects radio wave signals.
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
housings.
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically.
• There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare
tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a
chime will sound, and the DID will still display a
different color pressure value in the graphic display. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a
An ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message will still be displayed.
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
then remain on solid. In addition, the DID will display
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition
switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 6.4L Engine
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Premium” gasoline having a posted octane number of 91 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this
engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyPoor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard genates such as ethanol.
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considCAUTION!
ering service for the vehicle.
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoReformulated Gasoline
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner these blends may result in starting and drivability
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. problems, damage critical fuel system components,
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe- cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
prove air quality.
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop- than 15% ethanol (E-15).
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
system components.
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • Operate in a lean mode.
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Warranty.
• Poor engine performance.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer MMT In Gasoline
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
Limited Warranty.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim- MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
ited Warranty.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
and California reformulated gasoline.
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
Materials Added To Fuel
and diaphragm materials.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
Fuel System Cautions
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
CAUTION!
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor- Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
mance.
performance:
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso- • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perline contains a higher level of deterformance and damage the emissions control sysgents to further aide in minimizing
tem.
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
CAUTION! (Continued)
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the • Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
emergency refueling with a gas can.
door.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the
fuel door latch to the closed position.
5
Release Cable
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle components sometimes specified by purchasers for inincluding driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe label also specifies maximum capacities of front and cle’s GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Loading
Tire Size
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerInflation Pressure
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. WeighCurb Weight
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
Rim Size
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed TRAILER TOWING
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
the brakes operate.
and safely as possible.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING! (Continued)
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and and trailer when weighed in combination.
ready for operation⬙ condition.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaWARNING!
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg) or information.
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
(Continued)
5
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
The following chart provides the industry standard for correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
6.4L Automatic
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW (Gross
Combined Wt.
Frontal Area
Trailer Wt.)
Rating)
12,600 lbs
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 265 kg)
(5 715 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire–
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
• The manufacturer does not recommend using the run
flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or towing a trailer.
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
720 lbs (327 kg)
5
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (SRT
Models) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer
hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is
located at the bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the
locking retainer if needed for added leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainer
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you).
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
5
Hitch Receiver Cover
Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
3. Lower back down to disengage the tabs located at the To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat
top of the hitch receiver cover and then pull outwards the procedure in reverse order.
to remove.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
574 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Towing Requirements
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driveyour trailer hitch.
train components, the following guidelines are recomConsider the following items when computing the mended.
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In- Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
formation Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 575
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
576 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
STARTING AND OPERATING 577
5
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
578 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 579
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (749 kg).
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Tips
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
NOTE: To provide optimum towing performance and to
protect transmission components always select TOW
mode when towing a trailer. Before setting out on a trip,
practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an
area away from heavy traffic.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation presAutomatic Transmission
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper
inspection procedure.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW mode, or
use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor- gear.
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire
5
580 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Using TOW mode, or selecting a lower gear • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces(using the Paddle Shift switches) while operating the
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
conditions allow.
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
TOW Mode
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
heating, select TOW mode when driving in hilly areas, or
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
select a lower gear (using the Paddle Shift switches) on
you can get back to cruising speed.
more severe grades.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
AutoStick
maximize fuel efficiency.
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 581
Cooling System
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing is not allowed.
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . .
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . .
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . .
▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . .
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
. . . . . . . . . . .598
. . . . . . . . . . .598
. . . . . . . . . . .600
. . . . . . . . . . .602
. . . . . . . . . . .604
. . . . . . . . . . .608
6
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
may discharge the battery.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
110 Ft-Lbs (149 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
(Continued)
6
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Run Flat Tires
This vehicle is equipped with “run flat” tires. Run flat
tires allow the vehicle to be driven approximately 50
miles (80km) at 55 mph (88km/h). Tire service should be
obtained to avoid prolonged run flat feature usage.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” is illuminated. Vehicle
handling and braking may be reduced. You could
have a collision and be severely or fatally injured.
Jack Storage Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
NOTE: The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is Preparations For Jacking
located on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel
CAUTION!
into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For
vehicles not equipped with a spare tire, the fuel filler Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
funnel is stored in the left storage bin under the load jacking points. Failure to follow this information
floor. For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody
refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” in components.
this manual.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, refer to
“Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on disabling automatic
leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jacking Locations
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jack And Tool Assembly
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
6
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Front Jacking Location
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Rear Jacking Location
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
Stowed Spare
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
tray.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
road wheel in the cargo area.
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
NOTE: Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more
than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
6
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in precautions.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Preparations For Jump-Start
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenso please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
JUMP-STARTING
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the either vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
6
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri- Jump-Starting Procedure
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601
Connecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING! (Continued)
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
(Continued)
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000
rpm since it provides no charging benefit, wastes
fuel and can damage booster vehicle engine.
6
602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
in the reverse sequence:
you should have the battery and charging system tested
at your authorized dealer.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the dis- FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
charged vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603
selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
6
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
(Continued)
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
6
Manual Park Release Cover
Release Latch
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal 4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultalatch in towards the tether strap.
neously pull upwards on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can
be moved.
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
Released Position
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
6
Release Latch
Stowed Position
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks in place.
into position.
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for loading onto a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .612
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .623
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . .672
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .675
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .676
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENUINE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Engine Oil Dipstick
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10— Washer Fluid Reservoir
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
WARNING!
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
PROGRAMS
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
tracking device, it may:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
For states that require an Inspection and Maintesafety related systems, could be impaired or a
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- system is ready for testing.
sonal information.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
not proceed to the I/M station.
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
not crank or start the engine.
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light you may need to do nothing more than drive your
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
check.
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed
the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart of oil Change Engine Oil
when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
on these engines.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
CAUTION!
whichever occurs first.
• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration Engine Oil Selection
or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
For best performance and maximum protection under all
engine.
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
(Continued)
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the FCA Identification Symbol
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American PetroThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
leum Institute (API). The manufacengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartengine oils.
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Engine Oil Viscosity
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adoil meeting the FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
in all operating temperatures.
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addiThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
tives.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
tion.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomstation or governmental agency for advice on how and
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
your area.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
WARNING! (Continued)
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Maintenance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING!
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Gasoline Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if
you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should
change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
7
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
WARNING! (Continued)
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
(Continued)
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition switch position. You could be injured by
the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be • Rib or belt wear
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt viced at an authorized dealer.
body)
Conditions that would require replacement:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
CAUTION!
• Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter
motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
• Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
WARNING!
• When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do
not attempt jump-starting because the battery
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Battery temperature must be brought above the
freezing point before attempting a jump-start.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
(Continued)
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
• Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of
the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low
GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system maintenance intervals.
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, partially close
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartRight Side Of Glove Compartment
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compart1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
ment door.
2 — Glove Compartment Door
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on 6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the right side to fully remove the cover.
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in
the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
the glove compartment travel stops.
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Body Lubrication
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulatailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
tions of salt or road film.
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after from a dry windshield.
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
components to ensure proper function. When performing petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against
the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
7
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate
the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Installing The Front Wipers
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
is in the full up position.
glass.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
windshield.
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
vehicle.
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold
the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end
of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
7
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Rear Wiper
Adding Washer Fluid
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass This vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the Display (DID), the DID will indicate when the washer
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid
glass.
level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the outline and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. displayed.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
vehicle.
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
rating information can be found on most washer fluid have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damcontainers.
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
WARNING!
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
Commercially available windshield washer solvents exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
WARNING!
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
(Continued)
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
(Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning Cooling System
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
WARNING!
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
tions, should be obtained immediately.
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damcontrolled and can start at any time the ignition
age:
switch is in the ON position.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
motion.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
vehicle.
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Coolant Checks
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rublocal authorized dealer.
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
leaks.
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but MS.90032).
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. maintenance intervals.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conformwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) NOTE:
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
operated.
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
terial Standard MS.90032.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
dealer for assistance.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
(Continued)
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
spills immediately.
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for Points To Remember
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
a month.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezperformance, poor gas mileage, and increased emising.
sions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion maintenance intervals.
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low,
check system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
WARNING! (Continued)
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Transfer Case
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in (3 Fluid Level Check
mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
CAUTION!
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
Adding Fluid
and cause them to leak.
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recomsection for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
recommended fluid.
Drain
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
check your transmission fluid level using special service
any special additives in the transmission.
tools.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
product and its performance may be impaired by supplevisit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additransmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
tives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealwith an improper fluid level can cause severe transmisers as they may adversely affect seals.
sion damage.
Special Additives
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underUnder normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
body protection.
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. Howresistance built into your vehicle.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is What Causes Corrosion?
disassembled for any reason.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Special Care
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
the owner.
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
packaged and sealed.
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
and tarnishing.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
match the color of your vehicle.
surface.
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
ner:
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting leather upholstery.
with a clean, dry towel.
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
directly on the mirror.
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Glass Surfaces
7
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
7
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F03
F05
F06
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension - If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Pump
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F07
F09
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
F24
F25
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Starter Solenoid
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only) /
Brake Vacuum Pump
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped
Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4 / Exterior Lighting #1
Headlamp Washer- If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid- If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
Cavity
F26
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
F28
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
F42
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/
Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor - If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC - If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
Horn
7
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F44
F49
F50
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
F51
–
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
F56
F57
F58
F59
F60
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description
Diagnostic Port
Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control
Air Suspension Control Module - If
Equipped
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition /
Steering Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If
Equipped
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
NOX Sensor
HID Headlamps LH - If Equipped
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
Cavity
F61
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
F64
F66
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
F67
–
15 Amp Blue
F68
F69
F70
F71
F72
F73
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed - If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
PCM (If Equipped)
HID Headlamp RH - If Equipped
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F75
F76
F77
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F78
–
10 Amp Red
F80
–
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F83
F84
F85
F86
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Dual Batt Control (If Equipped)
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering
Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass /
Anti-Intrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise
Control / DTV
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Cavity
F87
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
F96
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
F98
F99
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
Description
Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow
/ Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp - If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter / Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera / ParkSense
Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp Charger - If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel
- If Equipped
Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems
Module / DSRC
7
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F100
F101
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
–
10 Amp Red
F104
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Active Damping - If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear
HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center
Console)
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Glove Compartment Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Rear Cargo Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
7
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
906
103
74
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam)
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam)
Headlamps (High Beam)
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker
Premium Front Side Marker - If Equipped
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
9005
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
H11
W5W
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
7444NA (WY27/8W)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
Rear Body Side Turn Signal Lamps
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Rear Body Side Stop Lamps
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
CHMSL - Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
LED LED LED LED -
Bulb Number
7440NA (WY21W)
(Service at Authorized
921 (W16W)
(Service at Authorized
3157KRD LCP
(Service at Authorized
(Service at Authorized
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
7
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
an authorized dealer for service.
1. Open the hood.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
seconds, as the system charges.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
clockwise to remove from housing.
the housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
7
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
lamp assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
7
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED. Service at
Authorized Dealer.
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
Rear License Lamp
1. The rear license lamps are LED. Service at Authorized
Dealer.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
25 Gallons
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
16 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94.0 Liters
6.6 Liters
15.5 Liters
7
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils
that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct
fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
8
682 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating NOTE:
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
illuminated.
The Driver Information Display (DID) will display an • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
“Oil Change Required” message and a single chime will
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 683
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
as required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, engine
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
oil, brake master cylinder, and add as needed.
referring to the steps described under “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
Panel” for further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
At Each Oil Change
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance • Change the engine oil filter.
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
hicle” for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
684 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
MAINTENANCE CHART
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before scheduled
maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
If using your vehicle for any of
the following: dusty or off-road
conditions. Inspect the engine
air cleaner filter; replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
160,000
108,000
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
180,000
96,000
90
150,000
102,000
90,000
84
170,000
84,000
78
140,000
80,000
78,000
70,000
72
130,000
Or Kilometers:
60,000
72,000
42
50,000
66
120,000
42,000
36
40,000
66,000
36,000
30
30,000
60
110,000
30,000
24
20,000
60,000
24,000
18
X
54,000
18,000
12
X
54
90,000
12,000
6
X
48
100,000
6,000
Or Months:
Inspect the exhaust system.
48,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 685
X
Adjust the parking brake on
vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
Drain the transfer case and
refill.
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the accessory drive
belts replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, sustained
high speed driving, off-road or
frequent trailer towing .
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
170,000
96,000
80,000
90,000
70,000
90
160,000
60,000
84
150,000
50,000
84,000
40,000
78
140,000
30,000
78,000
20,000
72
130,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 120 months if not
done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
72,000
42
Replace the spark plugs **
66
120,000
42,000
36
Inspect and replace the PCV
Valve if necessary
66,000
36,000
30
Replace the air conditioning
filter.
60
110,000
30,000
24
Replace the engine air cleaner
filter.
60,000
24,000
18
X
54,000
18,000
12
X
54
90,000
12,000
6
X
48
100,000
6,000
Or Months:
Inspect front suspension, tie
rod ends, and boot seals, for
cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
48,000
Miles:
10,000
686 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 687
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
Monthly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .691
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .695
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .692
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .692
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .693
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .696
9
690 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 691
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
692 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426-5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 693
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Service Contract
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
694 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARNING!
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 695
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
9
696 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and and/or components is written in straightforward lanRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
roadsafety/
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- assistance of service and engineering specialists to acmation that students and professional technicians need in quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 697
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro- DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety TIRE QUALITY GRADES
tips.
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
Call toll free at:
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
698 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
teristics and climate.
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
Traction Grades
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforpassenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
mance.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
WARNING!
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 699
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
702 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .190
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 144
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 144
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 69
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 109, 292
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .620
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 621, 627
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .434, 437
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626, 627
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 626
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
INDEX 703
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 295, 301, 321
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 677
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .425, 433
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 653
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 652
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 679
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .262
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297, 625
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
10
704 INDEX
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 559
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .613
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617, 619
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648, 679
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500, 647
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Braking Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669, 671
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
INDEX 705
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .98
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .97
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .89
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .85
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .645
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641, 646
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .643, 677, 678
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
10
706 INDEX
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 320 Driver Information Display
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . .400
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .262
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .35
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .185, 186, 190
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .298
INDEX 707
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .613
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641, 678
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 559
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555, 677
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616, 677, 678
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617, 619
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617, 677
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617, 619
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 559
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 639
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 621, 627
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 678
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
10
708 INDEX
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 315, 673, 674
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .678
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555, 678
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555, 677
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .250, 256
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
INDEX 709
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 555
G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 280
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 121
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 296, 297, 315
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
10
710 INDEX
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 464
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
iPod Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587, 588 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Lap History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Key Fob
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Lap Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 25
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 25 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
INDEX 711
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 166
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 109, 292
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 320
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671, 672
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .304
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 248
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
10
712 INDEX
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 166, 315, 673, 674
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .296, 315
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682, 684
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .304, 613
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 121
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
INDEX 713
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617, 619, 677
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615, 695 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325, 616, 678 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .6, 696
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 678
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 232
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617, 677 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
10
714 INDEX
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331, 367
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .529
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .262
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 144
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 144
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 144
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .645
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 19, 27, 31, 42
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
INDEX 715
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 232
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 25
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 25
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .421
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
10
716 INDEX
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .59
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 54, 56
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Seat Belt
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .59
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .62
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 142, 144, 149
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 144, 145
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 109
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
INDEX 717
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 295
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 471
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 315, 673, 674
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 540, 541, 589
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332, 333, 334, 335
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187, 189
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .185, 186, 190
SRT
G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Lap History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332, 333, 334, 335
Top Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 463
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
10
718 INDEX
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .421
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271, 669
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 669
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .68
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .433
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332, 333, 334, 335
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332, 333, 334, 335
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .528, 529
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 533, 539, 697
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
INDEX 719
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533, 539
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528, 529
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543, 597
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 533
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 541, 589
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . .
Top Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . .
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.574
.336
.336
.566
.581
.571
.581
.571
.581
.508
.513
.566
.581
.570
.574
.574
.576
.571
.571
10
720 INDEX
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 651
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .250
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 25
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315, 673, 674
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . .34, 36, 46
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 36, 46
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Uconnect
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
INDEX 721
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529, 564
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .20
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 669
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617, 619
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
Washers, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 638
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 262
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
16WK742-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2016 Grand Cherokee SRT
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
SRT
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising